2005 GMC Safari Owners Manual

2005 GMC Safari Owners Manual
2005 GMC Safari Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-6
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-33
Airbag System
......................................... 1-58
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-65
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-6
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-16
Mirrors .................................................... 2-28
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-29
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-33
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-25
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-39
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-41
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-32
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-47
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-48
Front Axle
............................................... 5-49
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-56
Tires
...................................................... 5-57
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-84
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-93
Electrical System ...................................... 5-94
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
.... 5-102
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC, the
GMC Truck Emblem, and the name SAFARI are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in
this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05SAFARI A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Power Seat ...................................................1-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-6
Bench Seat ...................................................1-6
Bucket Seats ...............................................1-12
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-18
Driver Position ..............................................1-18
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-26
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-26
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-26
Center Rear Passenger Position .....................1-29
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults .......................................1-30
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-32
Child Restraints .............................................1-33
Older Children ..............................................1-33
Infants and Young Children ............................1-35
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-41
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-44
Top Strap ....................................................1-45
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-47
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-49
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ............................................1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position (Bench Seat) .........................1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-55
Airbag System ...............................................1-58
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-61
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-62
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-62
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-64
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-65
Restraint System Check ..................................1-65
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-65
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-66
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
If your vehicle has manual
seats, they can be
adjusted forward or
rearward using the lever
located under the front
of the seat(s).
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1. Move the seat adjustment lever toward the outboard
side of the seat to unlock it.
2. Slide the seat to where you want it.
3. Release the lever and try to move the seat with
your body, to make sure that the seat is locked
into place.
1-2
Power Seat
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be controls
located on the inboard side of the driver’s seat.
To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion, raise or
lower the lever located toward the front of the vehicle.
To raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion, raise
or lower the lever located toward the rear of the vehicle.
To move the entire seat backwards, forward, or up or
down, move the center knob.
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a knob
located on the inboard side of the driver’s and
passenger’s bucket seats.
Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase
lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the rear of the
vehicle to decrease lumbar support.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
There is a lever located
on the inboard side of
the seat to adjust
the seatback.
1. Lift the lever and lean back until the seatback is at
the desired position.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it.
To return the seatback to an upright position, pull up on
the lever and lean forward.
1-4
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-5
Rear Seats
The center bench seat has a pivoting right armrest.
The optional bench seats come with moveable armrests,
individual reclining seatbacks, adjustable headrests
and a fold-down center armrest console.
Bench Seat
Each bench seat can carry up to three passengers.
They can also be removed to increase storage space.
See “Removing the Rear Seats” following.
Only the third row bench seat can be adjusted forward
or rearward.
Move the seat adjustment
lever located at the front
of the seat toward the
passenger’s side to unlock
it. Slide the seat to
where you want it and
release the lever. Try to
move the seat with
your body, to make
sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-6
To adjust your seatback, pull up on the lever located on
the outboard sides of the seat cushion.
Entering the Third Row Seat
The second row seat has
a seatback lever that
makes it easier to enter
the third row seat, if
equipped. The lever is
located on the right rear of
the second row seat.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Unlock the seatback lever by pulling up on the
lever while pushing down on the upper edge of
the seatback.
2. Move the seatback into the upright position.
3. Make sure the seatback is locked when it is back
in the upright position.
{CAUTION:
1. Pull up on the seatback release lever while pulling
the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
2. After the lever has been released, push the
seatback toward the front of the vehicle until it locks
into place.
1-7
Removing the Rear Seats
To remove the rear bench seats, do the following:
1. If you are removing the
center seat, remove
the right lap-shoulder
belt. To do this,
press the tip of a key
into the release
hole of the safety belt
attachment while
pulling up on the
safety belt.
2. If you have a safety
belt guide on your
seat, pull the safety belt
all the way out
through the guide.
3. To store the safety belt while the second row bench
seat is removed, pull the belt out and put both
buckles in the passenger’s side rear storage bin.
Route the belt out of the forward edge of the storage
bin. Close the cover to retain the belt.
4. Pull up on the seatback latch on the right rear of
the seat. Push the seatback down until it locks
into place.
1-8
5. Lift up on the left and the right seat release levers
at the same time. The latches are near the floor on
the rear legs of the seat.
6. Lift up on the rear of the seat to remove the seat
assembly from the rear latch pins. Then, pull the
whole seat back to remove the seat from the
front retainers and then lift the seat out of the
vehicle.
1-9
Reinstalling the Rear Seats
1. Lower the seat into position. Make sure the front
retainers are hooked onto the anchor pins.
1-10
2. Pull the seat down to latch the rear retainers. Make
sure the seat is locked in by pulling up and down
on the seat.
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
3. To raise the seatback, do the following:
3.1. Unlock the seatback latch by pulling up on
the latch release lever at the right rear of the
seat, while pushing down on the upper
edge of the seatback.
3.2. Move the seatback into the upright position.
Make sure the seatback is locked when it is
back in the upright position.
5. If you installed the safety belt with the release hole
facing inward (toward the seat), slide the plastic
cover up so you can see the buckle. Disconnect the
seat belt. Slide the cover back down and reinstall
the belt correctly.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
4. If you are replacing the center seat, connect the
right lap-shoulder belt to the attachment on the
seat cushion. If you have a safety belt guide on your
seat, pull the belt through the guide before
reattaching the lap-shoulder belt to the side of the
seat. The release hole should be facing outward.
1-11
Bucket Seats
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may have rear bucket seats with an
adjustment release bar located under the front of the
seats. These seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
with the release bar. Pull the release bar up to release
the seat bottom. Slide the seat where you want it
and then let go of the release bar. Then try to move the
seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-12
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-27.
1-13
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-15
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-33
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-35. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-18
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-32.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, push it in at the top of the arrows and
move the height adjuster to the desired position. You
can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to
where you want it, try to move it down without
pushing it in to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-18.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-26
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
These positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to
wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-32.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so that you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-27
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the pelvic bones. And you would be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
1-28
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Center Rear Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has rear bench seats, someone can sit in
the center positions.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the
same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If
the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on
page 1-32.
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-29
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear safety belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the
safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side
of the seatback.
1-30
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-31
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-26.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.
1-32
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-33
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provides.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-30.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-34
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Except Cargo Vans
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-35
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-36
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-37
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-38
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Cargo Vans
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-39
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be restrained in appropriate
infant restraints. However, infants, who should
be restrained in a rear-facing child restraint,
cannot ride safely in this vehicle.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-40
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash a baby will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-41
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-42
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s
belt system secures the add-on child restraint in
the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which
rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
1-43
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Except Cargo Vans
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here is why:
1-44
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Cargo Vans
Top Strap
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle. Here is why:
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always to
be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the front passenger position,
always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
1-45
If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top
strap under it.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
1-46
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Cargo Van
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the front passenger position,
always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
Cargo Van
If your vehicle is a cargo van, the anchoring point for a
top strap is located at the rear of the seat cushion
on the right front passenger’s seat spacer bar. Anchor
the top strap through the two slots.
1-47
Passenger Van
Passenger Van Bench Seat (Second Row)
Passenger Van Bucket Seats
Bucket Seats: An anchoring point is located below the
rear of the seat cushion on the spacer bar. Anchor
the top strap through the two slots on the bar.
1-48
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position, the second row
center position, or the third row outside positions if a
national or local law requires that the top strap be
anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
There is no place to anchor the top strap in these
positions.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Passenger Van Bench Seat (Third Row)
Bench Seats: An anchor bracket is located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the top rear of the seat leg
for each outboard seating position of the second row.
For the third row, an anchor bracket is located at
the rear of the seat cushion of the center seating
position.
If you have adjustable head restraints, raise the head
restraint and route the top strap under it.
If you have a passenger van it has the LATCH system.
It has two sets of anchors in the second row of seats.
In a seven passenger van, the anchors are located
in each of the bucket seats in the second row. In an
eight passenger van, the anchors are located in
the driver and passenger side seating positions of the
second row bench seat.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
1-49
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
1-50
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this
child restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point in
the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-45.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the
top tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the
LATCH anchorages.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49 in the Index.
See Top Strap on page 1-45 if the child restraint
has one.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
There are no top strap anchors at the third row outside
seating positions. Do not secure a child seat in these
positions if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that came
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1-52
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position
(Bench Seat)
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49. See Top Strap
on page 1-45 if the child restraint has one.
4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
There is no top strap anchor at the second row center
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the top
strap be anchored, or if the instructions that came
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-53
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49.
If your vehicle is a passenger van, there is no top strap
anchor in the right front passenger’s position. Do not
secure a child seat in this position if a national or local
law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that the
top strap must be anchored. See Top Strap on
page 1-45 if the child restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a front passenger airbag. Never put a
rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If your vehicle is a passenger van, always
secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat. If your vehicle is a cargo van, do not use
a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle. If
you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the passenger seat as far back as it will go.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
(Continued)
1-55
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-56
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-57
Airbag System
CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags – one airbag for the driver and
another airbag for the right front passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
(Continued)
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or
in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them.
Airbags are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
CAUTION:
1-58
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-33 and Infants
and Young Children on page 1-35.
United States
Canada
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-28 for more information.
1-59
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-60
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). (The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate
at a different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-61
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the
impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal
or near-frontal impacts.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger.
1-62
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But airbags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and many side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module — the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag — will be hot for a short time.
The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel or both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break
the airbag coverings.
1-63
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-64
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-65
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more sever crash, the you need
new parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If your seat adjuster will not work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
1-66
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-6
Door Locks ....................................................2-6
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-7
Sliding Side Door ...........................................2-8
Rear Doors ..................................................2-11
Windows ........................................................2-14
Manual Windows ..........................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-15
Passlock® ....................................................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-17
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-18
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18
Fuel Regulator .............................................2-19
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-19
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-20
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-22
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-23
Parking Brake ..............................................2-23
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-24
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-25
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-26
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-26
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-27
Mirrors ...........................................................2-28
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-28
Outside Manual Mirror ...................................2-28
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-28
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-29
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-29
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-30
Storage Areas ................................................2-33
Overhead Console ........................................2-35
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-38
Convenience Net ..........................................2-38
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
This vehicle has
one double-sided key
for the ignition and door
locks. It will fit with
either side up.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a
bar-coded tag.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your
dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.
Keep this tag in a safe place. If you lose your keys,
you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using
this tag.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-5.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
UNLOCK: Press UNLOCK
once for the driver’s door to
unlock, the parking lamps
to flash and the interior
lights to go on.
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
2-4
If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds, all
doors will unlock.
LOCK: Press LOCK to lock all the doors. Press LOCK
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
L (Panic Alarm): Press this button for the horn to
sound and the headlamps and taillamps to flash for up to
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the
panic button again, waiting for 30 seconds, or starting
the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery, do the following:
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
1. Insert a thin object like a dime to separate the
bottom of the transmitter from the top.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with a new one,
making sure the positive (+) side of the battery is
facing down. Use one Panasonic® three-volt,
type CR2032, or equivalent battery.
3. Snap the top and bottom together.
2-5
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Door Locks
To unlock your door from the outside, use your key
or remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
For more information, see Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 2-4.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-6
To lock or unlock the front
doors and sliding side door
from the inside, slide the
manual lock levers.
When the red mark on the
lock lever is visible, the
door is unlocked.
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has power
door locks, press the
power door lock switch
located on the door panel
to lock or unlock all the
doors at once.
The power door lock switch will lock or unlock the rear
hatch and Dutch doors. See “Hatch Release” in
Rear Doors on page 2-11.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will not
open the door. This will help stop a door from being
accidentally opened.
If the sliding door is open and you press the power door
lock switch, the sliding door will not lock immediately.
After you close the door, the system comes on and locks
the sliding door in about five seconds.
When the key is in the ignition and the power door lock
switch is pressed with a door open, all doors are
locked while the driver’s side door remains unlocked.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an auto lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your power
door locks.
Your vehicle left the factory programmed to have all the
doors lock automatically when the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P). All of the doors will unlock when
the shift lever is moved back into PARK (P). The
following instructions detail how to program your
door locks.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition in OFF. Then, pull back
on the turn signal/multifunction lever all the way
toward you and hold it while you perform the
next step.
2. Turn your key to RUN and OFF twice. Then, with
the key in OFF, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock
switch lock and unlock.
2-7
You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the following four programming
options and follow the instructions. You will have
thirty seconds to begin programming. If you exceed the
thirty second limit, the locks will automatically lock
and unlock to indicate that you have left the program
mode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning
with Step 1. You can exit the program mode any time by
turning the ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically
lock and unlock to indicate that you are leaving the
program mode. If the lock/unlock switches are not
pressed while in the programming mode, the auto
lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
• No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press
the lock side of the power lock switch on the door
panel twice. This turns off the automatic lock
feature.
For more information, see your dealer.
Sliding Side Door
The following is a list of the available programming
options:
• All doors lock/Only the driver’s door unlocks:
Press the lock side of the power lock switch on
the door panel once and then the unlock side once.
• All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door
panel once, and then the unlock side twice.
• All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press
the lock side of the power lock switch on the door
panel once, and then the unlock side three times.
To open the sliding side door, pull the handle toward
the back and slide the door to the rear until it rests in
the open position.
To close the sliding side door, pull the handle toward
the front and slide the door forward.
2-8
Sliding Door Security Lock
Your vehicle may have
this feature. A sliding door
security lock helps to
prevent young children
or other passengers from
opening the sliding
door using the inside
door handle.
There are two labels on your vehicle to remind you that
you have this feature. One can be seen from the
outside on your sliding door. It is located near the bottom
of the door glass, toward the front of the door. The
other label is located on the front of the sliding door,
near the security door lock.
This feature prevents passengers from opening the
sliding side door from the inside.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the lever all the way up.
2. Close the door.
To open the sliding side door while the security
lock is engaged, unlock the door and open it from
the outside.
The security door lock is located near the front of the
sliding door.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open
the sliding door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how the security door lock
works, and how to cancel the lock.
2-9
Canceling the Sliding Door
Security Lock
{CAUTION:
To cancel the security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
2-10
If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut, possibly
injuring someone. To make sure the door does
not slam shut be sure to hold it open until
everyone is clear of the door, and only then
allow it to slowly close.
Rear Doors
If your vehicle has Dutch doors, you must open the
hatch first. See “Hatch Release” later in this section.
To open the driver’s side
rear door, pull on the latch
release handle located
on the inside of the door.
Rear doors can only be
opened from the outside.
Open the passenger’s
side rear door first. Grasp
the handle and pull the
door open.
To close the rear doors, close the driver’s side
door first. Check to make sure both doors are
completely closed
Cargo Door Shown
The rear doors have a check assembly to keep
the doors from opening beyond 90 degrees.
2-11
To fully open the rear
doors, push in on the
clip and lift the check
assembly up off the
mounting bracket.
Do this on each door. Replace the check assemblies on
the mounting brackets before closing the doors.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the rear
glass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the rear glass open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
rear glass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-21.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-26.
2-12
Hatch Release
You can use your key to unlock the hatch and all of the
other doors from the outside. Insert the key into the
hatch release button and turn it counterclockwise. All of
the doors will unlock.
You may also use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
The hatch can be opened or closed without a key if the
door lock system is unlocked.
The interior light will not turn on if the rear doors
are open.
To open the hatch, unlock it, then press the button and
lift the handle located in the center of the door.
To lock the power lock system from the outside, insert
the key in the hatch release button and turn it clockwise.
All doors will lock.
2-13
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
2-14
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch. Press the down arrow on the driver’s
window switch marked AUTO briefly to activate the
express-down feature. The express-down feature can
be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow end
of the switch. Lightly tap the switch to open the
window slightly.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them from side to side. Your visors
may have an extension that can be pulled out for
additional glare protection.
If you have power windows, the controls are located on
each of the front doors. The driver’s door also has a
switch for the front passenger window. Your power
windows will not work unless the ignition is in RUN or
ACCESSORY, or unless retained accessory power
is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-18.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Lift the mirror cover on each visor to turn the lamps on.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is a big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
2-15
Passlock®
®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned to
RUN. See Security Light on page 3-36.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn
the engine off. However, your Passlock® system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at
this time. You may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95. See your
dealer for service.
2-16
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-33 for more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to
five different positions.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
radio in the accessory ignition position may drain the
battery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do not
operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition
position for a long period of time.
B (LOCK): This position locks your ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will
only be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
A (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio, power windows and windshield wipers
when the engine is off. To get into ACCESSORY, push
in the key and turn it toward you.
C (OFF): This position lets you turn off the engine.
Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion
while the engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is
being towed).
D (RUN): This is the position for driving.
E (START): This position starts your engine.
2-17
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
on your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows and overhead console will
work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.
Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF, these
features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or
until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
2-18
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the
accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Fuel Regulator
Your vehicle has a fuel regulator that shuts the fuel off
when the engine reaches 5,600 rpm.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater cord is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment, near
the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather,
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
2-19
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-20
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-24. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-33.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever – push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear
you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-25.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-26.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down. You will shift
down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) should be used for normal towing.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3) when
carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-21
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want
to use your brakes off and on.
Tow/Haul Mode
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature
for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you
are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the
transmission will not shift into first gear until the vehicle
is going slow enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-22
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul button. The
button is located on the end of the column shift
lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load.
To select the tow/haul mode, press in the button. The
TOW/HAUL light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. To go back to normal operation, press the
button again. The indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster will go out. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
page 3-37 for more information.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving
power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction
when needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions. This
is normal and is an indication that the all-wheel
drive system is functioning properly.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot.
Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the brake release lever located on the
lower left side of the steering column.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-33. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-23
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-33.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-24
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-24.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-20.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-25
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-26
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-26.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-24.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-33.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-22.
2-27
Mirrors
Outside Power Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Press
the tab forward (away from you) for day driving. Pull
the tab back (toward you) for night driving.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust your outside rearview mirrors so you can see a
little of the side of your vehicle and the area beside and
behind your vehicle, from a comfortable driving
position.
You can fold the mirrors inward before entering a car
wash. Pull the mirrors toward the vehicle. Push the
mirrors back out when finished. After pushing the mirror
out, the adjustment will be maintained.
2-28
Your vehicle may have this feature.
To adjust the outside rearview mirror, move the selector
switch in the middle of the control to L for the driver’s
side mirror or to R for the passenger’s side mirror. Then
use the arrows located on the four-way control pad to
move the mirror in the desired direction. To make
sure you do not accidentally move a mirror, return the
selector switch to the middle position (off) after adjusting
the mirrors.
Outside Convex Mirror
HomeLink® Transmitter
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
HomeLink,® a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink,® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-29
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
It is also recommended that upon the sale of the
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing
HomeLink® Buttons” or, for assistance, contact
HomeLink® on the internet at: www.homelink.com or
by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future HomeLink® programming.
2-30
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You do
not want to repeat step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming.
2-31
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ”
to complete.
2-32
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
Storage Areas
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
Your front storage compartment/glove box is at the
center of the engine cover. To open the compartment,
press the two tabs together and pull.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-33
If you have rear storage compartments, pull up on the
lid to open the cover.
2-34
There is also a map/storage pocket on the passenger’s
side of the engine cover console.
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Press the button near
each lamp to turn the
reading lamps on and off.
Your vehicle may have this feature.
The overhead console includes reading lamps, a
compartment for a garage door opener, a trip computer,
a temperature and compass display, and a storage
compartment for sunglasses.
The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the direction
you want.
The reading lamps, trip computer, temperature and
compass display will work when the ignition is in
RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-18.
2-35
Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead
compartment can be used to conveniently store
the opener.
1. To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the latch forward.
2. Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch.
3. Press it firmly to the back of your garage door
opener, as close to the center of the opener
as possible.
2-36
4. Center the garage door opener activation button
over the console door button and press the opener
firmly into place.
The pegs inside the
compartment door are
used to make sure
the button on the
compartment door
will contact the control
button on the garage
door opener.
5. Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when
you press the button. Adjust the position of the
garage door opener and add or remove pegs
as needed, until the opener operates properly.
6. Now, with the
compartment door
closed, press the
button again to
make sure the
garage door opener
operates properly.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you can press
the button to operate the opener.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a HomeLink®
Transmitter. For more information, see Programming the
HomeLink® Transmitter on page 2-30.
The overhead console has a sunglasses storage
compartment.
2-37
Luggage Carrier
If you have a luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has side rails and crossrails
attached to the roof to secure cargo.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. Follow these
guidelines:
• Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is not
recommended.
• Tie the load to the side rails. Use the crossrails only
to keep the load from sliding.
• If you need to carry long items, tie the load to the
side rails. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do
not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side
rails are damaged.
• After moving the crossrails, be sure to tighten all
the slider screws.
• For the purpose of wind noise reduction, locate the
front and rear crossrails in line with the two center
supports.
2-38
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-27.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage
carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
Convenience Net
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, in
place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you’re
not using it.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-15
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-16
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-17
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-18
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18
Exit Lighting .................................................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-19
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-20
Climate Controls ............................................3-21
Climate Control System .................................3-21
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-23
Rear Heating System ....................................3-23
Rear Air Conditioning System .........................3-24
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-27
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-28
Charging System Light ..................................3-29
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-29
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-30
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-32
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-35
Security Light ...............................................3-36
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-36
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .........................3-37
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-37
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-37
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-38
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-38
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-39
Audio System(s) .............................................3-41
Setting the Time for Radios with the
Set Button ................................................3-42
Setting the Time for Radios with HR and
MN Buttons ..............................................3-42
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-42
3-2
Radio with CD ..............................................3-44
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-49
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-50
Radio Reception ...........................................3-53
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-53
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-53
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-53
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Exterior Lamps. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-15.
B. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-17.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-20.
F. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-17.
G. Rear Defogger Button. See Climate Control
System on page 3-21.
H. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-21.
I. Rear Air Conditioning Control. See Rear Air
Conditioning System on page 3-24.
J. Rear Heater Control. See Rear Heating System on
page 3-23.
K. Rear Window Washer/Wiper Switch. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
L. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-20.
M. Dome Override Button. See Dome Lamps on
page 3-18.
N. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
O. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
on page 3-20.
P. Audio System(s). See Audio System(s) on
page 3-41.
Q. Front Storage Compartment. See Storage Areas on
page 2-33.
R. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-19.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is
located on top of the
steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the driver’s side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-9.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-10.
• Cruise Control (Option). See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-15.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is
used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will
flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the center position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash faster, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95.
3-8
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light
located on the instrument
panel cluster also will
be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in automatic.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear a click.
If your headlamps are in automatic or on low beam,
your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will stay on
as long as you hold the lever toward you and the
high-beam indicator located on the cluster comes on.
Release the lever to return to normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
To operate the windshield
wipers, turn the band,
located on the
multifunction lever, upward
or downward.
MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the windshield wipers start, then let
it go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you
want more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
OFF: Turn the band to turn off the windshield wipers.
LOW (Low Speed): Turn the band to LOW for
steady wiping at low speed.
HIGH (High Speed): Turn the band to HIGH for steady
wiping at high speed.
DELAY: Turn the band to one of the five delay settings
located between OFF and LOW, to choose the
delayed wiping cycle. The closer the band is turned to
OFF, the shorter the delay will be. For fewer wipes,
choose a setting closer to LOW. Use this setting for light
rain and snow.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-9
Windshield Washer
L(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
Your vehicle may have
this feature. The rear
window washer/wiper is
controlled by using
the switch located on the
instrument panel, next
to the audio system.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or
return to your preset speed.
To turn the wiper on, slide the switch all the way
up to ON.
For delay wiping, slide the switch up to the center
position next to the word DELAY on the rear wiper
control. The wiper will cycle every nine seconds.
To wash the window, push in on the switch. Window
washer fluid will continue to spray until the switch
is released. The wiper will continue with three more
wipes and then return to the setting that was chosen
before the lever was pushed.
3-10
Move the switch to OFF to turn off the rear
window washer.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the front windshield washer. If the fluid level is low in the
washer bottle, you may not be able to wash your rear
window. If you can wash your windshield, but not
your rear window, check the fluid level.
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may have this feature. With cruise control,
you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
3-11
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET
button at the end of the
lever and release it.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise
control switch from
ON to R/A
(Resume/Acclerate) briefly.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want,
and then release the switch. To increase your speed
in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A
briefly. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep going
faster until you release the switch or apply the brake.
So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch
at R/A.
3-13
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-14
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp control has three positions:
9 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns off
all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
;(Parking Lamps):
Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Ashtray Lamp
O(Headlamps):
The exterior lamp control is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
3-15
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To disable the
tone, turn the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel
all the way down. In the automatic mode, the
headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
•
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamp control is off,
the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P),
the light sensor determines it is daytime, and
the parking brake is released.
3-16
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the
last chosen headlamp setting that was used.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, put the
transmission in PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until
you shift out of PARK (P).
The following does not apply to vehicles first sold
in Canada.
When necessary, you may turn off the automatic
headlamp system and the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) feature by following the steps below:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times
within six seconds. After the fourth press of the
button, a chime will sound informing you that
the system is off.
To return to the automatic mode, push the DOME
OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds
(the chime will sound), or turn the ignition to off and
then to RUN again.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top of
the instrument panel in the defroster grille. Be sure it
is not covered, or the system will be on whenever
the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.
Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on
page 3-16 for more information.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps when you need them.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The thumbwheel for this feature is located to the right of
the exterior lamps control. Turn the thumbwheel up to
brighten the lights or down to dim them.
Moving the thumbwheel up to the first position will
activate the interior dome lamps.
3-17
Dome Lamps
Entry Lighting
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
The dome lamps will not come on if only the rear door
is opened.
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
Press the DOME OVERRIDE button in to cancel
automatic operation of the dome lamps. The button is
located near the exterior lamp control. Press the button
again to return it to the out position for normal
operation.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control, all
the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button to set the
dome lamps to come on automatically when a door
is opened, or to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press
the button into the in position, the dome lamps will
remain off when a door is open. To return the lamps to
automatic operation, press the button again and
return it to the out position. With the button in this
position, the dome lamps will come on when you
open a door.
3-18
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on if
the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position.
The dome lamps will not come on when the Dutch, or
rear doors are opened. When all the doors are
closed, the lamps will stay on for a short period of time
and will then go out. If the DOME OVERRIDE button
is pressed in, the lamps will not come on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The interior
lamps will not come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button
is pressed in.
Battery Run-Down Protection
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,
reading and glove box lights if they are left on for more
than 20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will
keep your battery from running down.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the power accessory plugs.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
• turn the ignition key to RUN.
Accessory Power Outlets
You can plug accessory electrical equipment into an
accessory power outlet. Just pull on the outlet cover to
remove it and follow the proper installation instructions
that are included with any electrical equipment that
you install.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The accessory power outlet is located on the
passenger’s side of the front storage compartment.
3-19
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The cigarette lighter is on the left of the engine cover
console.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way and let go.
When it’s done heating, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back away
from the heating element when it is hot. Damage
from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-20
The front ashtray is located above the passenger’s side
front cupholder. To remove the front ashtray, open it
and gently pull it slightly past its stop.
To remove the ashtray on the sliding door, open it, then
press down on the inside tab and pull it out.
You may have another ashtray on the driver’s sidewall.
Press the right side to turn the ashtray around for
use. To remove the ashtray, open it and gently pull it off
the hinge.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Climate Controls
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
) (Bi-Level):
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
This mode directs approximately half
of the air to the instrument panel outlets and directs
most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air
may be directed toward the windshield.
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
A/C (Air Conditioning): This setting brings in outside
air, cools and dehumidifies it.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): This setting
cools the air the fastest, by recirculating the inside air.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select the defrost
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can be
found later in this section.
9 (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-21
Defogging and Defrosting
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
-(Floor/Defog): With this setting, the outside air
comes out of both the floor and defroster outlets. Adjust
the temperature knob for warmer or cooler air. The
air conditioning compressor may operate in this setting
to dehumidfy the air.
Press this button to turn
the rear window defogger
on or off. Be sure to
clear as much snow from
the window as possible.
1(Defrost):
This setting operates the defroster. Most
of the air comes out near the windshield, with some
going to the floor outlets and front side windows. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting to
dehumidify the air.
The bi-level setting is useful for cold weather with a
large number of passengers or very humid conditions to
help keep the windshield clear. Use defrost to remove
fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely
cold conditions. The temperature knob should be in the
red area and the fan control toward high.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
3-22
The rear window defogger will turn off several minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will run for several more minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
Outlet Adjustment
Move the thumbwheel in the center of the outlets up or
down to change the direction of airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Rear Heating System
Your vehicle may have a rear heating system that
allows you to adjust the amount of air flowing into the
rear of the vehicle, from the front seating area. This
feature works with the main climate control system in
your vehicle.
The thumbwheel for this system is located to the right of
the audio system.
Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase or
decrease the amount of heated air sent to the rear
seating area.
3-23
Rear Air Conditioning System
Your vehicle may have a rear air conditioning system
that allows you to adjust the fan speed in the rear
seating area, from the front seating area. This feature
works with the main climate control system in your
vehicle.
To direct the airflow to the rear seating area, use the
right knob located on the main climate control panel.
Generally the upper outlets are used for air conditioning
and the floor outlets are used for heating.
9 (Fan):
Move the thumbwheel up or down to HIGH,
MED (Medium) or LOW to increase or decrease the
fan speed in the rear seating area. Move the
thumbwheel to OFF to turn off the fan.
The thumbwheel for this system is located to the right of
the controls for the climate control system.
Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase or
decrease the amount of cooled air sent to the rear
seating area.
3-24
To increase or decrease the temperature for the entire
vehicle, use the center knob located on the main
climate control panel.
The air conditioning system on the main climate control
panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the
rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature
in the rear of the vehicle will remain at cabin
temperature.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of
any objects so that the air inside of your vehicle can
circulate effectively.
For information on how to use the main climate control
system, see Climate Control System on page 3-21.
For information on ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on
page 3-23.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-26
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to
turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the TRIP
button. To change back to the regular odometer, press
the TRIP button again.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
come on to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the tone
nor the light will come on.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
The trip odometer will appear in place of your regular
odometer when you press the TRIP button.
3-27
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on
the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-58.
United States
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
Canada
This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and
it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should
go out. This means the system is ready.
3-28
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, before starting
the engine, as a check
to show you it is working.
After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays
on or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with your charging system. It could indicate a
problem with the generator drive belt, or some other
charging system problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
the gage shows your
battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
3-29
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If
it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
You can only drive for a short time with the readings in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
3-30
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in
this section.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves to the
red area, your engine is
too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-29.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States or Check Engine Light
in Canada
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK
ENGINE light comes on and a chime will sound to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
3-32
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Reducing vehicle speed
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding hard accelerations
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
3-33
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not
working properly.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-34
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage
shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds
per square inch) when the
engine is running.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but
readings above the low pressure zone indicate the
normal operating range.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-35
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to START.
This light will illuminate
when the headlamp high
beams are in use.
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the Passlock® System has entered a tamper
mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-16.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
System. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your GM dealer.
3-36
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.
The SERVICE AWD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light should come on
when the tow/haul mode
has been selected.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in Towing a
Trailer on page 4-33.
Check Gages Warning Light
The CHECK GAGES
light will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
3-37
Fuel Gage
Here are things some owners ask about. None of these
indicate a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• The fuel tank will take either a little more or a little
less fuel to fill up than the gage shows.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
United States
Canada
The fuel gage tells you approximately how much fuel
you have remaining when the ignition is on.
When the gage first indicates empty, you still have a
little fuel left, but you should get more fuel as soon
as possible.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The LOW FUEL light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
3-38
Driver Information Center (DIC)
US/MET (United States/Metric) Button
The US/MET button allows you to switch the display
between the English and metric system.
MODE Button
The MODE button can be used to toggle between
three modes of operation: OFF, COMP/TEMP and TRIP.
OFF: No driver information is displayed in this mode
of operation.
COMP/TEMP (Compass/Temperature): This display
provides the outside temperature and one of
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing.
Your vehicle may have a Driver Information Center (DIC)
located on the overhead console. This DIC displays
the outside air temperature, compass direction and trip
information in the overhead console. The temperature,
compass display and trip computer will work when
the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-18.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on. If the outside
temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower, the display will
toggle between the word ICE and the current
temperature every eight seconds. This is a warning to
the driver that road conditions may be icy, and that
appropriate precautions should be taken.
See “Compass Variance” later in this section for more
information.
TRIP: In the TRIP mode, pressing the MODE button
cycles through the five TRIP displays. See “Trip
Computer” later in this section for more information.
3-39
Compass Variance
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference
between the two can be great enough to cause false
compass readings. If this happens, follow these
instructions to set the variance for your particular
location:
Setting the Variance
1. Find your location on the zone map. Record your
zone number.
2. Press and hold both the US/MET and the MODE
buttons while in the COMP/TEMP mode.
3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge
the variation mode by displaying the current zone
number. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press MODE to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set and the display will return to
the COMP/TEMP mode.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to
be manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is displayed,
the compass will need to be calibrated. You may also
place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing
and holding the US/MET and MODE buttons
simultaneously while in the COMP/TEMP mode. After
about 10 seconds, the compass will display C and
you can release the buttons. Drive the vehicle in
a complete 360° circle three times at a speed of less
than 5 mph (8 km/h), and the compass will function
normally. Once the calibration is complete, the display
will return to a compass reading.
3-40
Trip Computer
Audio System(s)
There are five trip computer displays available by
pushing the MODE button. The information will appear
in the following order:
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
AVG ECON (Average Economy): This display shows
the average fuel economy since the last reset.
INST ECON (Instantaneous Economy): This display
shows fuel economy for the most recent second of
driving.
RANGE: This display shows the estimated distance
that can be traveled with the remaining fuel. The
fuel economy used to calculate range is based on the
last few hours of driving.
FUEL USED: This display shows the accumulated fuel
used since the last reset.
AVG SPEED (Average Speed): This display shows the
average speed since the last reset.
Resetting the Trip Computer
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-18 for more
information.
To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and
US/MET buttons simultaneously for at least
two seconds. All functions will be displayed briefly once
the system is reset. Reset can only be performed in
the AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes.
All three modes are reset simultaneously.
3-41
Setting the Time for Radios with the
Set Button
AM-FM Radio
Press and release the SET button. Within five seconds,
press and hold the left SEEK arrow until the correct
hour appears on the display. Press and hold the right
SEEK arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display.
Setting the Time for Radios with HR
and MN Buttons
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the time with
the ignition off, press RECALL, HR, or MN and the time
will appear on the display for a few seconds. There
is an initial two-second delay before the clock goes into
the time-set mode.
Playing the Radio
Power: Turn the VOLUME knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch the display between
the radio station frequency and the time. When the
ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
3-42
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM-FM: Press this knob to switch between FM1, FM2,
and AM. The display will show the selection.
Up to 21 stations (seven FM1, seven FM2, and
seven AM) can be programmed on the four numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press AM-FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press SET. SET will appear on the display.
o SCAN p: Press both SCAN arrows at the same
time. SCAN will appear on the display. The radio will go
to the next station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press the RECALL knob or either
SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within
five seconds. Whenever that numbered pushbutton
is pressed, the station that was set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to
three more stations may be preset on each band by
pressing two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time and by performing the following steps:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. SET will appear on the display.
3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two pushbuttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-43
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or to
decrease bass.
TREB (Treble): Slide this lever up or down to increase
or to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): Turn the control ring behind the
upper knob to move the sound toward the left or the
right speakers.
FADE: Turn the control ring behind the lower knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
3-44
Radio with CD
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
and AM. The display will show the selection.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The knob is capable of rotating
continuously.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
select radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you are not using it.
RECALL: Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
When the ignition is off, press this button to display
the time.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or previous station and stay there.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, the
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control
ring behind the upper knob clockwise to increase
the SCV. Each notch on the control ring allows for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then,
as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The
volume level should always sound the same to you as
you drive. To turn SCV off, turn the control all the
way down.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
P.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button and the radio
will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds then go on to the
next preset station. P.SCAN will appear on the
display. Press this button again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan the preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-45
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this knob to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
either press and release the AUTO TONE button
until the display goes blank or press and release the
BASS or TREB knobs and turn them until the display
goes blank.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns,
release the pushbutton. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set
will return and the equalization that was selected will
be stored for that pushbutton.
BAL (Balance): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease the bass.
TREB (Treble): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease the treble. If a
station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when you
are not using them.
3-46
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when you
are not using them.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first
press the EJECT button. If you insert a CD with
the radio off and the ignition on, it will start to play.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, CD and a CD symbol will appear
on the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if more then eight seconds
have played. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving backward
through the CD.
2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
3-47
o SEEK p: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the CD.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long the current track has been playing. Press this
button again to return to the time display.
CD Messages
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. CD and the CD symbol will
appear on the display when a CD is loaded.
• There may have been a problem while burning
EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may
be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button
is pressed first.
try again.
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off of the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-48
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio and CDs. However, the rear
seat passengers can only control the sources that the
front seat passengers are not listening to. For example,
rear seat passengers may listen to and control a CD
through headphones while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers
switch the source for the main radio to a remote source,
the RSA will not be able to control the remote source.
You can operate the RSA when the main radio is off.
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the system on
or off. The rear speakers will be muted when the
power is turned on.
VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
Push the knob back into it’s stored position when
you are not using it. The upper knob controls the upper
headphones and the lower knob controls the lower
headphones.
3-49
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. If the front seat passengers are listening to
the radio, the RSA will not switch between the bands
or change the frequency.
Press AM FM to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
w SEEK x:
When listening to the radio, press the up
or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous
station and stay there. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow until SCAN appears on the radio display.
The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow
again to stop scanning. This function is inactive if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to
the next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go to
the start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
3-50
P.SET PROG (Preset Program): Press this button to
scan the preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on
the main radio. The radio will go to a preset station,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press this button again to stop scanning.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play CD when listening
to the radio.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret code to
disable all radio functions whenever battery power is
interrupted.
The THEFTLOCK® feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the radio plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK® is
activated, the radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK® is activated, LOC will appear on
the radio display to indicate a locked condition anytime
battery power has been interrupted. If the battery
loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio
with the secret code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
The instructions which follow explain how to enter
your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK® system.
Read through all nine steps before starting the
procedure.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time
and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
8. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. REP will appear on the display to indicate
that Steps 5 through 7 need to be repeated to
confirm your secret code.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number
from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place
separate from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Turn the radio off.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
9. Press AM FM again. SEC will appear on the display
to indicate that the radio is secure. The LED
indicator by the volume knob will begin flashing
when the ignition is turned off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time.
Hold them down until --- appears on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which you
have written down.
3-51
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature
After a Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the
display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. The display will show SEC, indicating
the radio is now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances, eight
tries per chance, to enter the correct code before INOP
appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your GM dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the
same time until SEC appears on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. --- will appear on the display, indicating that
the radio is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio will not turn on and LOC
will appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in
this section.
3-52
Radio Reception
Care of Your CD Player
AM
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-53
✍ NOTES
3-54
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-8
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-10
Passing .......................................................4-10
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Driving at Night ............................................4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
City Driving ..................................................4-17
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-18
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-19
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-20
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-20
Winter Driving ..............................................4-22
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow ...................................................4-26
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-26
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-27
Towing ..........................................................4-32
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-32
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-33
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-12.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
4-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
4-4
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Control of a Vehicle
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of
a second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths
of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h)
travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in
an emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
4-5
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear
out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
4-6
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-31.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
4-7
Using Anti-Lock
Steering Tips
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Driving on Curves
Braking in Emergencies
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
4-8
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
4-9
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-10
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-11
Loss of Control
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
4-12
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-13
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-14
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-15
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-16
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-57.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-18.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-17
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-18
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-19
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-20
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
•
•
•
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-21
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-57.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
4-22
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
4-23
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-24
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-25
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-26
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-70.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-32.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached
to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door
open, you will find the label attached below the door
lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label
shows the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
4-27
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-57
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-28
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-33 for
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-29
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1000 lbs (453 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
0 lbs (0 kg)
This label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and
tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-30
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside of your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-31
Trailering Package
Recreational Vehicle Towing
There is a load rating which includes the weight of the
vehicle and the trailer it tows. This rating is called
the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known as
a “dolly”).
When you weigh your trailer, be sure to include the
weight of everything you put in it. And, remember
to figure the weight of the people inside the vehicle as
part of your load.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
4-32
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, it should be placed on a platform trailer.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-33
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Tow/Haul Mode
If you do, here are some important points:
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• See “Driving on Grades” later in this section for
more information.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
4-34
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts,
• provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded, and
• improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less
throttle pedal activity.
Press the button on the end of the shift lever to turn
tow/haul mode on and off. While activated, the indicator
light on the instrument panel will be on. Tow/haul
mode will turn off automatically when the ignition is
turned off. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-37.
Tow/haul is most effective when the vehicle and trailer
combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle’s
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight
of the Trailer” later in this section.
Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy load will
cause reduced fuel economy and unpleasant engine
and transmission driving characteristics, but will
not cause damage.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that
you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Two-Wheel Drive (Cargo)
Two-Wheel Drive (Passenger)
All-Wheel Drive (Cargo)
All-Wheel Drive (Passenger)
Axle Ratio
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment
and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
Max. Trailer Wt. (lbs) (kg)
5,300 (2404)
5,800 (2631)
4,900 (2223)
5,400 (2449)
5,000 (2268)
5,500 (2495)
4,700 (2132)
5,200 (2359)
GCWR (lbs) (kg)
9,500 (4309)
10,000 (4536)
9,500 (4309)
10,000 (4536)
9,500 (4309)
10,000 (4536)
9,500 (4309)
10,000 (4536)
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-35
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 200 lbs (92 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 750 lbs (341 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
them right simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. If
you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t
go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight
distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
4-36
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when you’re driving. You should always use a sway
control if your trailer will weigh more than these limits.
You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you’re using the wiring provided with the
factory-installed trailering package, you should not need
to make any holes in the body of your vehicle.
However, if you have an aftermarket hitch installed, you
may need to make holes in the body.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you
remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into
your vehicle as well as dirt and water. See “Carbon
Monoxide” under Engine Exhaust on page 2-26.
4-37
Safety Chains
Trailer Brakes
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system, except:
• Don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the
trailer’s brake system will use more than 0.02 cubic
inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master
cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t work
well. You could even lose your brakes.
• Will the trailer parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of
pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must not
be used with your vehicle.
• If everything checks out this far, then make the
brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use
copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and
finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.
4-38
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can not see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-26. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
in the Index.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-39
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring (included in the optional trailering package).
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-40
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat
warning, see Engine Overheating on page 5-29.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-41
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-42
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
If you have the optional trailering package, your vehicle
will have an eight-wire harness, including the center
high-mounted stoplamp battery feed wire. The harness
is stored on the passenger’s side of the vehicle near
the rear wheel well. This harness has a 30 amp battery
feed wire and no connector, and should be wired by
a qualified electrical technician. After choosing an
aftermarket trailer mating connector pair, have the
technician attach one connector to the eight-wire trailer
harness and the other connector to the wiring harness
on the trailer.
Be sure the wiring harness on the trailer is taped or
strapped to the trailer’s frame rail and leave it loose
enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but not so
loose that it drags on the ground. The eight-wire
harness must be routed out of your vehicle between the
rear door and the floor, with enough of the harness
left on both sides so that the trailer or the body won’t
pull it.
If you do not have the optional trailering package, your
vehicle will still have a trailering harness. The harness
is located near the passenger’s side rear wheel
well. It consists of six wires that may be used by
after-market trailer hitch installers.
The technician can use the following color code chart
when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brown: Rear lamps
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal
White (Heavy Gage): Ground
Light Green: Back-up lamps
White (Light Gage): Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Blue: Auxiliary circuit (eight-wire harness only)
Orange: Fused auxiliary (eight-wire harness only)
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the
harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t
be damaged.
4-43
✍ NOTES
4-44
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
Engine Cover ...............................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-24
Engine Coolant .............................................5-27
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-29
Engine Overheating .......................................5-29
Cooling System ............................................5-31
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-36
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-42
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-47
Rear Axle .......................................................5-48
Front Axle ......................................................5-49
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-50
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-50
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .................5-50
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ..............5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-54
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-56
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-56
Tires ..............................................................5-57
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-63
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-64
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-66
Buying New Tires .........................................5-66
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-69
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-69
Tire Chains ..................................................5-70
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-71
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-72
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-73
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-76
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-82
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-84
Appearance Care ............................................5-84
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-85
Vinyl ...........................................................5-86
Leather .......................................................5-87
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-87
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-87
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-87
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-88
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-88
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-88
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-89
Finish Care ..................................................5-89
5-2
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-90
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-90
Tires ...........................................................5-91
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-91
Finish Damage .............................................5-91
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-92
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-92
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-92
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-93
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-93
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-94
Electrical System ............................................5-94
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-94
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-94
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-95
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-95
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-95
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-96
Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-98
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-102
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-32.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
5-5
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-32. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
5-7
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the
cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-88.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-32.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-32.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle on the lower
driver’s side of
the instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot marked
PROP ROD.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop and remove the hood prop from the slot in
the hood. Return the prop to its retainer and pull
the hood down. Then close the hood firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, you will see the following:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-31.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-24.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-38.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
I. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
5-13
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-14
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the MIN line, then you will need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use
the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to
use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-101.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-15
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-16
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these are true for you, use the short
trip/city maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi,
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
5-17
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Cover
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Removing the Engine Cover
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-18
1. Move both front seats as far back as they will go.
2. Remove the instrument panel extension by
removing the two nuts that secure it in place. The
nuts are located at the bottom of the extension
on the driver’s and passenger’s side corners.
3. Remove the screws located near the top on each
side of the extension. Grasp the extension from
both sides and gently remove it.
5-19
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors and set the
extension aside.
5-20
5. Grasp the top of the heater duct and pull down
gently to remove it.
6. Loosen the two bolts on the engine cover. The
bolts are not supposed to come out of the cover,
only from the front of the dash.
When removing the cover, be careful not to damage
the instrument panel or the trim.
8. Grasp the bottom of the cover and slide it rearward.
Then, lift it up and out of the vehicle.
If the seal does not release, use the pull strap on
the driver’s side above the rear mount.
7. Disconnect the AM radio ground strap.
5-21
Reinstalling the Engine Cover
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Lift the engine cover into the front of the vehicle
and slide it all the way forward. Make sure the
rubber seal is over the latches.
2. Tighten the two bolts located on the engine cover
to reinstall the cover to the front of the dash.
3. Put the heater duct over the engine cover studs.
Push up on the duct gently until it snaps into place.
4. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Reconnect the AM radio ground strap.
6. Reinstall the engine cover extension by gently
squeezing the sides and sliding it into place.
Make sure all of the fastener clips engage and the
extension fits properly in place. Reinstall and
tighten the two screws.
7. Reinstall the two nuts to secure the extension
in place.
5-22
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter every
15,000 miles (25 000 km) and replace every
45,000 miles (75 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Unsnap both clips on the filter cover.
2. Remove the cover.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Replace the cover.
5. Snap both clips to secure the cover.
5-23
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25,000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-24
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive
the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the
engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder
than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the engine
longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold
check, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.
Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
is located near the center
of the engine compartment
and will be labeled with
the graphic shown.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-25
2. Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission
dipstick tube only after checking the transmission
fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only
as a reference.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for
a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched
area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick
pointed down to get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-30.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
5-26
Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transmission fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in
this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Coolant
What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-27
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at ADD or a
little higher. When your engine is warm, the level
should be up to FULL HOT or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
recovery tank is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
5-28
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-31.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The radiator pressure cap
is located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-31.
5-29
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-30
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-33.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
5-31
The coolant level should be at the ADD mark if the
engine is cold, or the FULL HOT mark if the engine is
warm. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
5-32
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for more information.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap, but now
push down as you
turn it. Remove
the pressure cap.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-34
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the ADD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler
neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrow on
the pressure cap lines up properly.
5-35
Engine Fan Noise
Power Steering Fluid
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch
engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the power steering fluid reservoir location.
5-36
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-30. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use
the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
5-37
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
Notice:
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of
the reservoir.
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-38
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-28.
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it is not, have your brake
system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
5-39
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-30.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
5-40
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-84.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-29.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
5-41
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
5-42
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-50.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) and a manual
transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the
parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all
lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries. And it could save
the radio!
5-43
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on each
battery.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-28.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-30.
5-47
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-30.
5-48
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-30.
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you may need to
add some lubricant.
5-49
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-56.
Sealed Beam Headlamp
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-50
1. Remove the
four retainer screws
and the retainer
from the headlamp.
2. Pull the connector out
and unplug the lamp.
Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Remove the
two screws from the
sidemarker/turn
signal lamp assembly.
3. Plug the new lamp into the connector.
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the headlamp.
5-51
4. Remove the screw
located behind the
corner reflector
to remove the entire
corner reflector.
3. Completely remove the sidemarker/turn signal lamp
assembly by pulling it out and disconnecting the
sidemarker/turn signal lamp sockets from the lamp.
Replace the sidemarker/turn signal bulb with a
new one if it needs to be replaced.
5-52
7. Turn the halogen bulb
counterclockwise to
remove it from
the assembly.
5. Remove the remaining three screws, the first
one from the corner reflector pocket and the
two remaining from the composite assembly.
8. Install the new bulb into the composite assembly by
turning it clockwise until it is completely tightened.
9. Reinstall the composite assembly by installing and
tightening all of the screws previously removed.
6. Remove the composite assembly.
5-53
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
1. Remove the two screws at the inside edge of the
parking/turn signal lamp assembly.
2. Remove the lamp assembly.
3. Squeeze the tab
on the side of the lamp
socket while turning
the socket
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the socket out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket.
6. Gently push the new bulb into the socket.
7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Put the parking/turn signal lamp assembly back into
the vehicle and tighten the screws.
5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the rear door. See Rear Doors on page 2-11
for more information.
2. Remove the
two screws
from behind
the door.
4. Press the tab and
turn the socket
counterclockwise to
remove the socket from
the bezel. If the
socket does not have a
tab, turn the socket
counterclockwise
to remove the socket
from the bezel.
3. Pull out the taillamp assembly so you can see
the socket.
5. Remove the old bulb from the socket and replace it
with a new one.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the taillamp.
5-55
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamps
Headlamps
Composite High-Beam
Composite Low-Beam
Sealed-Beam Headlamps
Parking, Turn Signal Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Stoplamps
Bulb Number
1156
9005
9006
H6054
3157NA
194
2057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper
Blade Check” in At Least Twice a Year on page 6-24 for
more information.
5-56
To replace your windshield
wiper blade inserts, do
the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Pinch the two tabs on the wiper arm and slide the
insert out of the blade.
3. Slide the new one in place.
Make sure the tabs are locked into position. See Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 5-102 for
the proper type of replacement blade.
Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear window wiper
blade, follow the procedure above to replace the
wiper blade.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-27.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all
tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-63.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
5-57
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
5-58
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-67.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-84
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-71.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-59
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and
the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
5-60
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of
a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes
the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-61
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-63 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
5-62
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-66.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-67.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-27.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-63
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-27. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-84.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5-64
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are
cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-66 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-69 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-63 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-101.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
patterns shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-72.
5-65
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
5-66
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-27, for examples of the labels and where they
can be found on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-84.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-67
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-68
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72 for more
information.
5-69
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-70
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-71
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
rear of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire, on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
CAUTION:
5-72
(Continued)
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you’ll need is stored by your
vehicle’s rear doors, along the passenger’s side wall.
1. Remove the jack cover by pulling it away from
the side wall and down to release the tabs
securing the top of the cover.
2. Remove the wheel blocks by turning the top nut
counterclockwise. Remove the nut and washer,
then pull the wheel blocks off the bolt.
3. Push down on the bolt and remove the hooked end
from the slot. Slide the jack toward the front of the
vehicle and lift it from the mounting. Remove
the extension and the ratchet from the pouch.
5-73
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to the
storage position under the vehicle when it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tire
when the vehicle is on the ground.
The ratchet has
an UP side.
It also has a DOWN side.
Your compact spare tire is stored underneath the
rear of your vehicle. You will use the ratchet
and extension to lower the compact spare tire.
4. Attach the ratchet to the extension, with the DOWN
side facing you. The extension has a socket end
and a flat chisel end.
5-74
5. Put the flat end of the extension on an angle
through the hole in the rear door frame, above
the bumper. Be sure the flat end connects into the
hoist shaft.
7. Tilt the retainer plate
at the end of the
cable, when the tire
has been lowered,
and pull it through the
wheel opening.
8. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
6. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the
compact spare tire to the ground. Keep turning
the ratchet until the spare tire can be pulled out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
5-75
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
If your vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen them
by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The
wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center
cap. Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry it out.
1. Before you start, block the front and rear of the tire
farthest away from the one being changed. Then
put your compact spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), wheel
blocks (B), extension (C) and ratchet (D).
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
5-76
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
2. With the DOWN side facing you, turn the ratchet
and socket to loosen all the wheel nuts
counterclockwise. Don’t remove them yet.
3. Attach the socket end of the extension to the
jack bolt.
4. Attach the ratchet to the extension with the UP side
facing you.
5. Turn the ratchet clockwise. That will raise the jack
lift head a little.
5-77
6. Position the jack under the vehicle. Use the above
diagram to locate the general positions for placing
the jack.
5-78
Front Position
A. Front Jack Location
B. Jack
C. Ratchet and Extension
Rear Position
A. Rear Jack Location
B. Jack
C. Ratchet and Extension
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the compact spare tire to fit underneath
the wheel well.
5-79
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
8. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Put on the compact spare tire on the mounting
surface.
5-80
11. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the
cone-shaped end is toward the wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the wheel is held against the
hub. If a nut cannot be turned by hand, use
the extension and see your dealer as soon as
possible.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-101 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-101 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-81
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Turn the ratchet
clockwise with the
UP mark facing you.
14. Remove the wheel blocks.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover, center cap, or lug nut
caps on your compact spare tire. They will not fit.
Store the wheel cover, center cap, or lug nut caps in the
trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5-82
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
To store a flat tire, do the following:
1. Put the flat tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Tilt the retainer plate downward and through the
wheel opening. Make sure it is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel. Attach the ratchet,
with the UP side facing you, to the extension.
3. Put the flat end of the extension on an angle
through the hole in the rear door frame, above
the bumper.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-84. See the storage instructions label to
restore your compact spare properly.
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the ratchet/wheel wrench until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. The spare
tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push and
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten
the cable.
6. Return the jacking equipment to its proper location.
5-83
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s
best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
5-84
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in a closed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage the
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
5-85
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the
fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
5-86
may have to be done more than once.
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Leather
Interior Plastic Components
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-92.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
5-87
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-92. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you
could damage your vehicle. Verify with the manager
of the car wash that your vehicle will fit before
entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-88
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-88.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-92.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-89
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum Wheels
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-90
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Finish Damage
Tires
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-91
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-92
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one easy step,
Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-93
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the front passenger door
frame. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flicker on and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
5-94
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper
linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from
the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Spare fuses and a fuse puller are located in the
underhood fuse block. You can remove fuses with
the fuse puller. Remember to replace any of the spare
fuses you use, so you will have some if you ever
need them again.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: one is inside
the vehicle and one is in the engine compartment.
5-95
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block is located on the lower portion of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side.
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
1
2
3
5-96
Usage
Stop/Turn/Hazard Lamps,
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp,
Anti-Lock Brakes
Radio Accessory, Rear Seat Audio
Controls
Courtesy Lamps, Glove Box Lamp,
Dome Reading Lamps, Vanity Mirror
Lamps, Courtesy Lamps
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Usage
Daytime Running Lamps Relay,
Instrument Panel Cluster
Rear Defogger
Cruise Module, Truck Body Control
Module, Instrument Panel Cluster,
Cruise Control Switch,
Electrochromic Mirror
Power Outlets, Subwoofer Amplifier
Crank Circuit Fuse, Park/Neutral
Switch, Starter Enabler Relay
License Plate Lamp, Tailamps,
Parking Lamps, Ashtray Lamp,
Panel Lights, Trailer Taillamps,
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamps,
Door Switch Illumination, Headlamp
Switch Illumination, Rear Seat Audio
Illumination, Truck Body Control
Module
Air Bag System
Not Used
Blower Motor, Rear Air Conditioning
Relay Coil, Front Cont. Temp. Door
Motor, HI Blower Relay, Defogger
Timer Coil
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock
Switches, Dutch Door Release
Module
Cluster Illumination, Climate
Controls, Chime Module, Radio
Illumination, Rear Heat Switch
Illumination, Rear Wiper/Washer
Switch Illumination, Rear Liftgate
Switch Illumination, Remote
Cassette Illumination, Overhead
Console, Truck Body Control
Illumination
Truck Body Module, Headlamp
Relay
Front Turn Signals, Rear Turn
Signals, Trailer Turn Signals,
Back-Up Lamps, Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock
Solenoid
Front Wipers, Front Washer Pump
VCM-Ign 3, VCM-Brake, Cruise
Stepper Motor Signal, ATC Module
5-97
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
19
20
21
22
23
24
Circuit
Breakers
A
B
Usage
Underhood Fuse Block
Instrument Panel Radio: ATC
(Main Feed), 2000 Series (Standby)
PRNDL/Odometer, Shift A and
Shift B Solenoids, 3–2 Downshift
Solenoid, Instrument Panel Cluster,
VCM Module
Power Adjust Mirrors
Not Used
Rear Wiper, Rear Washer Pump
Not Used
Usage
Power Door Lock Relay, 6-Way
Power Seats
Power Windows
The underhood fuse block is located toward the rear of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
Lift the hood and open the cover to gain access to this
fuse block.
A fuse puller is included in the underhood fuse block.
You will also find spare fuses.
5-98
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
UPFITTER BATT
UPFITTER ACCY
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ECM-1B
HORN
A/C COMP
RR HTR/AC
ATC
FRT HVAC
ENG-I
Usage
Upfitter Battery Power Stud, Trailer
Wiring Harness
Upfitter Accessory Relay
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuel Pump Relay and Motor, VCM,
Oil Pressure Switch/Sender
Horn Relay and Horn
Air Conditioning Enable Relay and
Compressor
Rear Heater and Air Conditioning
Active Transfer Case-L Van
Front Heater and Air Conditioning
Oxygen Sensors, Camshaft Position
Sensor, Mass Air Flow Sensor,
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent
Solenoid
5-99
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
IGN-E
Usage
Air Conditioning Enable Relay Coil
Fuel Injectors 1–6, Crankshaft
ECM-I
Position Sensot, VCM, Coil Driver
Module (EST), Ignition Coil
BLANK
Not Used
RH HDLMP
Right Headlamp
LH HEADLAMP Left Headlamp
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
DIODE-1
Air Conditioning
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
Courtesy Fuse, Power Adjust
LIGHTING
Mirrors Fuse, Truck Body Control
Battery Fuse
Power Accessory Circuit Breaker,
Stop/Hazard Fuse, Auxiliary Power
BATT
Fuse, Cigarette Lighter Fuse, Radio
Battery Fuse
IGN A
Starter Relay, Ignition Switch
IGN B
Ignition Switch
ABS
Electronic BrakeControl Module
5-100
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
BLANK
RAP
HTD MIR/
RR DEFOG
Relays
A/C RELAY
UPFITTER ACCY RELAY
STARTER
ENABLE
RELAY
A/C ENABLE
RELAY
HEAD LAMPS
RELAY
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
Feed
AUX B
AUX A
Usage
Not Used
Radio Accessory, Power Windows
Rear Window Defogger, Climate
Control Head
Usage
Rear/Heat and Air Conditioning
Upfitter Accessory
Starter
Air Conditioning
Headlamps
Fuel Pump
Usage
Upfitter Battery Feed
Upfitter Accessory Feed
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-30 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant (R134a)
Front A/C
Front and Rear A/C
Cooling System
Without Rear Heater
With Rear Heater
Differential Fluid
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
English
Metric
2.3 lbs
3.0 lbs
1.0 kg
1.4 kg
13.5 quarts
16.5 quarts
12.8 L
15.6 L
2.6 pints
3.5 pints
1.2 L
1.7 L
4.5 quarts
4.3 L
27.0 gallons
101.8 L
5.0 quarts
4.7 L
140 ft lb
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling. See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity
information and requirements.
5-101
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
“Vortec” 4300 V6 MFI*
LU3
Automatic
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
*Micro Fuel Injection
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Fuel Filter
PCV Valve
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades (Trico Type)
Front – 18 inches (45.7 cm)
Rear – 14 inches (35.5 cm)
5-102
GM Part Number
25098463
25010792
15050894
6487532
25162556
22110431
22121329
ACDelco® Part Number
A1163C
PF47
GF481
CV 769-C
41–932
—
—
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-4
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-16
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-23
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-23
At Least Once a Month .................................6-23
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-24
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-25
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-28
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-28
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-28
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-28
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-28
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-29
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection ........................6-29
Brake System Inspection ................................6-29
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-30
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-32
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your GM dealer’s service department do
these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported
service people that will perform the work using genuine
GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using GM parts.
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses them. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you to keep
your vehicle in good working condition. But we do not
know exactly how you will drive it. You may drive
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
6-4
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-27.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi, or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Front Wheel Bearing Repack
(two–wheel drive only) (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first). Automatic Transmission Service
(severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement.
Every 45,000 Miles (75 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions). Transfer
Case Fluid Change.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 150 000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs
first). Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area,
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Chassis Lubrication (or 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Automatic Transmission Service
(severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Front Wheel Bearing Repack
(two–wheel drive only) (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
Every 45,000 Miles (75 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
6-6
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions). Transfer
Case Fluid Change.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs
first). Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of
this vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-23
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-28.
Footnotes
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints and kingpin
bushings, steering linkage, parking brake cable
guides and brake pedal springs.
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-29.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
6-8
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
6-9
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-10
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
❑ If you have not used your vehicle under severe
service conditions listed previously and, therefore,
have not changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
❑ Change transfer case fluid.
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
6-11
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
6-12
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-13
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
6-14
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ If you have not used your vehicle under severe
service conditions listed previously and, therefore,
have not changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
❑ Change transfer case fluid.
❑ Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
6-15
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-23
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-28.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints and kingpin
bushings, steering linkage and transfer case shift
linkage, parking brake cable guides and brake
pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-29.
6-16
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
6-17
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
6-18
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †).
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
❑ If you have not used your vehicle under severe
conditions listed previously and, therefore, have
not changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
❑ Change transfer case fluid.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
6-19
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †).
6-20
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and
repack the front wheel bearings (or at each
brake relining, whichever occurs first).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
6-21
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
6-22
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ If you have not used your vehicle under severe
service conditions listed previously and, therefore,
have not changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
❑ Change transfer case fluid.
❑ Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-37 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-57 for further
details.
6-23
At Least Twice a Year
Spare Tire Check
Restraint System Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that
the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try
to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-72.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 5-90.
6-24
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-30.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-24. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, the body hood, fuel door
and rear compartment hinges, latches and locks
including interior glove box and console doors, hood
latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl and any moving seat hardware. Lubricate
the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot. Part D
tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-23
if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
6-25
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-23 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-26
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P)
Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-27
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-26.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-28
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months, or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Check and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent
hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation.
6-29
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-14.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean,
water and use only
Engine Coolant drinkable
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27.
6-30
Usage
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM
Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Front Wheel
Bearings
Front Axle
Fluid/Lubricant
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2,
Category GC or GC-LB
(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344, in
Canada 993037).
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052271, in
Canada 10950849).
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
Transfer Case
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in
Canada 10953626).
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
6-31
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-32
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-33
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-34
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ..........................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-10
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filling out a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use the Text
Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available
at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user
can communicate with GMC by dialing:
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583). (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
GMC, the letter should be addressed to GMC’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto
Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
The offer is available for a limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance
program. This value-added service is intended to
provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city
or travel the open road. Call 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782) to speak with a GMC Road Assistance
representative 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
7-5
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide you with specific
information regarding this feature.
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: Your
Roadside Assistance Representative can provide
you with specific information regarding this feature.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
7-6
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN) and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. GMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782, text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
GMC reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in GMC’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GMC helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up
to 10 miles from the dealership.
7-7
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five day maximum
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-8
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782),
or write:
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
7-11
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-12
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-19
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-65
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-94
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-22
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-21
Airbag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-28
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-58
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-65
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-64
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-62
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-62
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-61
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-60
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-47
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-23
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ............................ 3-37
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-42
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-53
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-31
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-84
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-90
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-88
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-92
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-89
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-85
Finish Care ................................................. 5-89
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-91
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-87
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-87
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-87
Leather ...................................................... 5-87
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-91
Tires .......................................................... 5-91
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-92
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-92
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-86
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-88
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-90
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-20
1
Audio System(s) .............................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Radio with CD ............................................
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................
Setting the Time for Radios with HR and
MN Buttons .............................................
Setting the Time for Radios with the
Set Button ..............................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-41
3-42
3-53
3-53
3-53
3-44
3-49
3-42
3-42
3-50
3-53
3-17
5-24
2-20
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-42
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-19
Bench Seat ..................................................... 1-6
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-23
2
Brake (cont.)
System Inspection ....................................... 6-29
System Warning Light .................................. 3-30
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-5
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16
Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-12
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-50
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-56
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-54
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-66
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-101
Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-26, 4-22, 4-33
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-88
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-53
Your CDs ................................................... 3-53
Center Rear Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-29
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-70
Charging System Light ....................................
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Gages Warning Light ...................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
3-29
3-32
3-37
5-10
5-92
1-41
1-35
1-49
1-33
1-51
1-53
1-52
1-55
1-45
1-47
1-44
3-20
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-90
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-89
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-85
Finish Care ................................................. 5-89
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-87
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-87
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-87
Leather ...................................................... 5-87
Tires .......................................................... 5-91
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-92
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-86
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-88
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-90
Climate Control System ................................... 3-21
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-23
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................ 3-24
Rear Heating System ................................... 3-23
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-30
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-84
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-38
3
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-31
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-19
Cooling System .............................................. 5-31
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-11
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ........................................ 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
4
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-6
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-7
Rear Doors ................................................. 2-11
Sliding Side Door .......................................... 2-8
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-18
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-39
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-13
City ........................................................... 4-17
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-18
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-20
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-26
Winter ........................................................ 4-22
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .........................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Underhood Fuse Block .................................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
Cover ........................................................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Fan Noise ..................................................
Fuel Regulator ............................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
5-94
5-95
5-94
5-96
5-95
5-98
5-95
5-22
5-42
3-32
5-27
2-19
3-31
6-28
5-18
5-12
2-26
5-36
2-19
5-14
5-29
2-18
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-32
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-15
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-22
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-91
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-53
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-71
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-72
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-82
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-24
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-49
5
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-38
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-38
Regulator ................................................... 2-19
System Inspection ....................................... 6-28
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-96
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-98
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-95
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light ..........................
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Voltmeter Gage ...........................................
6
3-37
3-31
3-38
3-35
3-27
3-29
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-29
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-94
Headlamps
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-17
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-50
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................ 5-50
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-16
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................... 5-50
Heater ........................................................... 3-21
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-36
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-20
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-20
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-29
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-30
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-18
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-17
Cluster ....................................................... 3-26
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
I
Ignition Positions .............................................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ..................................
Inspection
Brake System .............................................
Engine Cooling System ................................
Exhaust System ..........................................
Fuel System ...............................................
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .......................
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal .........................................
Throttle System ...........................................
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) ......................................
2-17
1-35
5-63
6-29
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-28
6-29
6-29
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall ....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Exterior ......................................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
5-58
3-19
3-18
3-15
1-49
1-51
7
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-31
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-30
Charging System ......................................... 3-29
Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-37
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-36
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-38
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-32
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-27
Security ..................................................... 3-36
Service All-Wheel-Drive ................................ 3-37
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-37
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-18
Exit ........................................................... 3-18
Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-8
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-6
Power Door .................................................. 2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-7
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-16
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-38
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-38
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3
8
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-102
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-23
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-23
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-25
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-24
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-29
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-28
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-28
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-28
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-16
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-23
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-28
Part D - Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants ......................................... 6-30
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-32
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-4
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-6
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-28
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-29
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection ....................... 6-29
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-32
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-14
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-28
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-29
Outside Manual Mirror .................................. 2-28
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-28
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-27
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-27
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-10
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-14
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-35
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-33
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-23
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-29
Manual Mirror ............................................. 2-28
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-28
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-35
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-102
9
P
Q
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-24
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-25
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-23
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-26
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-23
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-28
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-30
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-32
Passing ......................................................... 4-10
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-16
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-19
Door Locks .................................................. 2-7
Electrical System ......................................... 5-95
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-18
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-7
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-30
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-17
10
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-29
Radios .......................................................... 3-41
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-42
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-53
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-53
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-44
Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-49
Setting the Time for Radios with HR and
MN Buttons ............................................. 3-42
Setting the Time for Radios with the
Set Button .............................................. 3-42
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-50
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-53
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................... 3-24
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-48
Locking ........................................................ 4-8
Rear Doors .................................................... 2-11
Rear Heating System ...................................... 3-23
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-30
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-49
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-26
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-28
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-73
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-56
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
General Motors ........................................... 7-10
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-65
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-66
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-65
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-66
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-18
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-26
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-26
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-27
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-27
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-88
Center Rear Passenger Position .................... 1-29
Driver Position ............................................ 1-18
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-18
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-17
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-30
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-26
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-26
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-32
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-26
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-25
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Seats
Bench Seat .................................................. 1-6
Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-12
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3
Power Seat .................................................. 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
11
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-53
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-51
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-52
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-55
Security Light ................................................. 3-36
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-4
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-5
All-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-37
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-32
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-64
Setting the Time
Radios with HR and MN Buttons ................... 3-42
Radios with the Set Button ........................... 3-42
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-91
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-24
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-25
12
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-6
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-25
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Sliding Side Door ............................................. 2-8
Spare Tire
Installing .................................................... 5-76
Removing ................................................... 5-73
Storing ....................................................... 5-82
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-101
Speedometer .................................................. 3-27
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-18
Steering .......................................................... 4-8
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection ..................................... 6-28
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-33
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-38
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-38
Overhead Console ....................................... 2-35
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-26
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
T
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-54
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-50
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-15
Passlock® ................................................... 2-16
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-29
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tires ............................................................. 5-57
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-90
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-66
Chains ....................................................... 5-70
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-72
Cleaning .................................................... 5-91
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-84
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-71
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-63
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-64
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-76
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-73
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-82
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-69
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-69
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-66
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-45
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-47
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-22
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-37
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-33
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-32
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-24
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-20
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-27
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-53
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-67
13
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ............................................. 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-93
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-94
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-23
Visors ........................................................... 2-15
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-29
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-25
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
14
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-69
Replacement ............................................... 5-69
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-44
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Manual ...................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-90
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-37
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-56
Fuses ........................................................ 5-95
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-22
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement